diff options
| author | bubulle <bubulle@alioth.debian.org> | 2008-10-26 20:15:36 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | bubulle <bubulle@alioth.debian.org> | 2008-10-26 20:15:36 +0000 |
| commit | 2203bd59918d6d70515f9dad601cb5c0ef098092 (patch) | |
| tree | 0b472a747e13ffdfbe3a279642478a7e918cb9e3 /docs/htmldocs | |
| parent | f1687970584d5b9090cc6b338d0ce35277b26ba4 (diff) | |
| download | samba-2203bd59918d6d70515f9dad601cb5c0ef098092.tar.gz | |
Load samba-3.3.0pre2 into branches/samba/upstream.upstream/3.3.0_pre2
git-svn-id: svn://svn.debian.org/svn/pkg-samba/branches/samba/upstream@2195 fc4039ab-9d04-0410-8cac-899223bdd6b0
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs')
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/Packaging.html | 12 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/index.html | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/pt05.html | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html | 13 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html | 44 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html | 29 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html | 34 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html | 17 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html | 19 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html | 14 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html | 110 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html | 1156 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html | 18 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html | 41 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html | 16 |
16 files changed, 831 insertions, 700 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/Packaging.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/Packaging.html index 559856365c..eece4d1fdb 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/Packaging.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/Packaging.html @@ -1,10 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"><link rel="start" href="index.html" title="SAMBA Developers Guide"><link rel="up" href="pt05.html" title="Part V. Appendices"><link rel="prev" href="pt05.html" title="Part V. Appendices"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="navheader"><table width="100%" summary="Navigation header"><tr><th colspan="3" align="center">Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</th></tr><tr><td width="20%" align="left"><a accesskey="p" href="pt05.html">Prev</a> </td><th width="60%" align="center">Part V. Appendices</th><td width="20%" align="right"> </td></tr></table><hr></div><div class="chapter" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title"><a name="Packaging"></a>Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</h2></div><div><div class="author"><h3 class="author"><span class="firstname">Jelmer</span> <span class="surname">Vernooij</span></h3></div></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554577">Versioning</a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554604">Modules</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="sect1" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="id2554577"></a>Versioning</h2></div></div></div><p> -Please, please update the version number in <code class="filename">source/include/version.h</code> to include the -versioning of your package. This makes it easier to distinguish standard samba builds from custom-build samba -builds (distributions often patch packages). For example, a good version would be: +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"><link rel="start" href="index.html" title="SAMBA Developers Guide"><link rel="up" href="pt05.html" title="Part V. Appendices"><link rel="prev" href="pt05.html" title="Part V. Appendices"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="navheader"><table width="100%" summary="Navigation header"><tr><th colspan="3" align="center">Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</th></tr><tr><td width="20%" align="left"><a accesskey="p" href="pt05.html">Prev</a> </td><th width="60%" align="center">Part V. Appendices</th><td width="20%" align="right"> </td></tr></table><hr></div><div class="chapter" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title"><a name="Packaging"></a>Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</h2></div><div><div class="author"><h3 class="author"><span class="firstname">Jelmer</span> <span class="surname">Vernooij</span></h3></div></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554577">Versioning</a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554612">Modules</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="sect1" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="id2554577"></a>Versioning</h2></div></div></div><p> +Please, please set the vendor version suffix and number in <code class="filename">source/VERSION</code> and call +<code class="filename">source/script/mkvesion.sh</code> to include the versioning of your package. There is also +the possibility to set a function to create the vendor version. This makes it easier to distinguish +standard samba builds from custom-build samba builds (distributions often patch packages). For example, +a good version would be: </p><pre class="programlisting"> Version 2.999+3.0.alpha21-5 for Debian -</pre></div><div class="sect1" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="id2554604"></a>Modules</h2></div></div></div><p> +</pre></div><div class="sect1" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="id2554612"></a>Modules</h2></div></div></div><p> Samba3 has support for building parts of samba as plugins. This makes it possible to, for example, put ldap or mysql support in a separate package, thus making it possible to have a normal samba package not depending on ldap or mysql. To build as much parts of samba as a plugin, run: diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/index.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/index.html index d17e80f7ee..d02b5f788d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/index.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/index.html @@ -20,4 +20,4 @@ Print Queue TDB's ChangeID and Client Caching of Printer Information </a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="devprinting.html#id2554251"> Windows NT/2K Printer Change Notify -</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd><dt><span class="part"><a href="pt05.html">V. Appendices</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="Packaging.html">16. Notes to packagers</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554577">Versioning</a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554604">Modules</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd></dl></div></div><div class="navfooter"><hr><table width="100%" summary="Navigation footer"><tr><td width="40%" align="left"> </td><td width="20%" align="center"> </td><td width="40%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="pr01.html">Next</a></td></tr><tr><td width="40%" align="left" valign="top"> </td><td width="20%" align="center"> </td><td width="40%" align="right" valign="top"> Attribution</td></tr></table></div></body></html> +</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd><dt><span class="part"><a href="pt05.html">V. Appendices</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="Packaging.html">16. Notes to packagers</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554577">Versioning</a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554612">Modules</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd></dl></div></div><div class="navfooter"><hr><table width="100%" summary="Navigation footer"><tr><td width="40%" align="left"> </td><td width="20%" align="center"> </td><td width="40%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="pr01.html">Next</a></td></tr><tr><td width="40%" align="left" valign="top"> </td><td width="20%" align="center"> </td><td width="40%" align="right" valign="top"> Attribution</td></tr></table></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/pt05.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/pt05.html index 00fc74cf99..f3f64039d8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/pt05.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba3-Developers-Guide/pt05.html @@ -1 +1 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>Part V. Appendices</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"><link rel="start" href="index.html" title="SAMBA Developers Guide"><link rel="up" href="index.html" title="SAMBA Developers Guide"><link rel="prev" href="devprinting.html" title="Chapter 15. Samba Printing Internals"><link rel="next" href="Packaging.html" title="Chapter 16. Notes to packagers"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="navheader"><table width="100%" summary="Navigation header"><tr><th colspan="3" align="center">Part V. Appendices</th></tr><tr><td width="20%" align="left"><a accesskey="p" href="devprinting.html">Prev</a> </td><th width="60%" align="center"> </th><td width="20%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Packaging.html">Next</a></td></tr></table><hr></div><div class="part" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="id2554551"></a>Part V. Appendices</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="Packaging.html">16. Notes to packagers</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554577">Versioning</a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554604">Modules</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div></div><div class="navfooter"><hr><table width="100%" summary="Navigation footer"><tr><td width="40%" align="left"><a accesskey="p" href="devprinting.html">Prev</a> </td><td width="20%" align="center"> </td><td width="40%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Packaging.html">Next</a></td></tr><tr><td width="40%" align="left" valign="top">Chapter 15. Samba Printing Internals </td><td width="20%" align="center"><a accesskey="h" href="index.html">Home</a></td><td width="40%" align="right" valign="top"> Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</td></tr></table></div></body></html> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>Part V. Appendices</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"><link rel="start" href="index.html" title="SAMBA Developers Guide"><link rel="up" href="index.html" title="SAMBA Developers Guide"><link rel="prev" href="devprinting.html" title="Chapter 15. Samba Printing Internals"><link rel="next" href="Packaging.html" title="Chapter 16. Notes to packagers"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="navheader"><table width="100%" summary="Navigation header"><tr><th colspan="3" align="center">Part V. Appendices</th></tr><tr><td width="20%" align="left"><a accesskey="p" href="devprinting.html">Prev</a> </td><th width="60%" align="center"> </th><td width="20%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Packaging.html">Next</a></td></tr></table><hr></div><div class="part" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="id2554551"></a>Part V. Appendices</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="Packaging.html">16. Notes to packagers</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554577">Versioning</a></span></dt><dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Packaging.html#id2554612">Modules</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div></div><div class="navfooter"><hr><table width="100%" summary="Navigation footer"><tr><td width="40%" align="left"><a accesskey="p" href="devprinting.html">Prev</a> </td><td width="20%" align="center"> </td><td width="40%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Packaging.html">Next</a></td></tr><tr><td width="40%" align="left" valign="top">Chapter 15. Samba Printing Internals </td><td width="20%" align="center"><a accesskey="h" href="index.html">Home</a></td><td width="40%" align="right" valign="top"> Chapter 16. Notes to packagers</td></tr></table></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html index 40a80d4ae9..a053e7b81c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html @@ -26,14 +26,13 @@ id allocation that may be used in internal backends like BUILTIN. </p><pre class="programlisting"> [global] - idmap domains = ALLDOMAINS - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:backend = ad - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:default = yes - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:range = 10000 - 300000000 + idmap backend = tdb + idmap uid = 1000000-1999999 + idmap gid = 1000000-1999999 - idmap alloc backend = tdb - idmap alloc config:range = 5000 - 9999 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479187"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + idmap config CORP : backend = ad + idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999 + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479186"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6952cd9890 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_adex</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_adex.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_adex — Samba's idmap_adex Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> + The idmap_adex plugin provides a way for Winbind to read + id mappings from an AD server that uses RFC2307 schema + extensions. This module implements both the idmap and nss_info + APIs and supports domain trustes as well as two-way cross + forest trusts. It is a read-only plugin requiring that the + administrator provide mappings in advance by adding the + POSIX attribute information to the users and groups objects + in AD. The most common means of doing this is using "Identity + Services for Unix" support on Windows 2003 R2 and later. + </p><p> + Note that you must add the uidNumber, gidNumber, and uid + attributes to the partial attribute set of the forest global + catalog servers. This can be done using the Active Directory Schema + Management MMC plugin (schmmgmt.dll). + </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>NSS_INFO</h2><p> + The nss_info plugin supports reading the unixHomeDirectory, + gidNumber, loginShell, and uidNumber attributes from the user + object and the gidNumber attribute from the group object to + fill in information required by the libc getpwnam() and + getgrnam() family of functions. Group membership is filled in + according to the Windows group membership and not the + msSFU30PosixMember attribute. + </p><p> + Username aliases are implement by setting the uid attribute + on the user object. While group name aliases are implemented + by reading the displayname attribute from the group object. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2480124"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + The following example shows how to retrieve idmappings and NSS data + from our principal and trusted AD domains. + </p><pre class="programlisting"> + [global] + idmap backend = adex + idmap uid = 1000-4000000000 + idmap gid = 1000-4000000000 + + winbind nss info = adex + winbind normalize names = yes + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2480144"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + The original Samba software and related utilities + were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed + by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + </p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f425fe29e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_hash</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_hash.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_hash — Samba's idmap_hash Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_hash plugin implements a hashing algorithm used + map SIDs for domain users and groups to a 31-bit uid and gid. + This plugin also implements the nss_info API and can be used + to support a local name mapping files if enabled via the + "winbind normlaize names" and "winbind nss info" + parameters in smb.conf. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2518313"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">name_map</span></dt><dd><p> + Specifies the absolute path to the name mapping + file used by the nss_info API. Entries in the file + are of the form "<em class="replaceable"><code>unix name</code></em> + = <em class="replaceable"><code>qualified domain name</code></em>. + Mapping of both user and group names is supported. + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2480121"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The following example utilizes the idmap_hash plugin for + the idmap and nss_info information. + </p><pre class="programlisting"> + [global] + idmap backend = hash + idmap uid = 1000-4000000000 + idmap gid = 1000-4000000000 + + winbind nss info = hash + winbind normalize names = yes + idmap_hash:name_map = /etc/samba/name_map.cfg + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2480142"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + The original Samba software and related utilities + were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed + by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + </p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html index 0dc38a0c53..3d25a92de4 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html @@ -31,37 +31,25 @@ Specifies the LDAP server to which modify/add/delete requests should be sent. If not defined, idmap_ldap will assume that ldap://localhost/ should be used. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> - Defines the available matching uid and gid range from which - winbindd can allocate for users and groups. If the parameter - is absent, Winbind fail over to use the "idmap uid" - and "idmap gid" options from smb.conf. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482463"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> - The follow sets of a LDAP configuration which uses a slave server - running on localhost for fast fetching SID/gid/uid mappings, it - implies correct configuration of referrals. - The idmap alloc backend is pointed directly to the master to skip - the referral (and consequent reconnection to the master) that the - slave would return as allocation requires writing on the master. + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482448"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + The follow sets of a LDAP configuration which uses two LDAP + directories, one for storing the ID mappings and one for retrieving + new IDs. </p><pre class="programlisting"> [global] - idmap domains = ALLDOMAINS - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:default = yes - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:backend = ldap - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:ldap_base_dn = ou=idmap,dc=example,dc=com - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:ldap_url = ldap://localhost/ - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:range = 10000 - 50000 + idmap backend = ldap:ldap://localhost/ + idmap uid = 1000000-1999999 + idmap gid = 1000000-1999999 - idmap alloc backend = ldap - idmap alloc config:ldap_base_dn = ou=idmap,dc=example,dc=com - idmap alloc config:ldap_url = ldap://master.example.com/ - idmap alloc config:range = 10000 - 50000 + idmap alloc backend = ldap + idmap alloc config : ldap_url = ldap://id-master/ + idmap alloc config : ldap_base_dn = ou=idmap,dc=example,dc=com </pre></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>NOTE</h2><p>In order to use authentication against ldap servers you may need to provide a DN and a password. To avoid exposing the password in plain text in the configuration file we store it into a security store. The "net idmap " command is used to store a secret for the DN specified in a specific idmap domain. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482509"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482490"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html index c177691bf3..bd655990e6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html @@ -9,18 +9,13 @@ own domain while using allocation to create new mappings for trusted domains </p><pre class="programlisting"> [global] - idmap domains = SAMBA TRUSTEDDOMAINS + idmap backend = tdb + idmap uid = 1000000-1999999 + idmap gid = 1000000-1999999 - idmap config SAMBA:backend = nss - idmap config SAMBA:readonly = yes - - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:default = yes - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:backend = tdb - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:range = 10000 - 50000 - - idmap alloc backend = tdb - idmap alloc config:range = 10000 - 50000 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2516107"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + idmap config SAMBA : backend = nss + idmap config SAMBA : range = 1000-999999 + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2516103"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html index 7495ee62a1..1e76560df7 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html @@ -13,18 +13,17 @@ by default start at 1000 (512 hexadecimal), this means a good value for base_rid can be 1000 as the resulting ID is calculated this way: ID = RID - BASE_RID + LOW RANGE ID. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2516123"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>This example shows how to configure 2 domains with idmap_rid</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </p><p> + Use of this parameter is deprecated. + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479163"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>This example shows how to configure a domain with idmap_rid</p><pre class="programlisting"> [global] - idmap domains = MAIN TRUSTED1 + idmap backend = tdb + idmap uid = 1000000-1999999 + idmap gid = 1000000-1999999 - idmap config MAIN:backend = rid - idmap config MAIN:base_rid = 0 - idmap config MAIN:range = 10000 - 49999 - - idmap config TRUSTED1:backend = rid - idmap config TRUSTED1:base_rid = 1000 - idmap config TRUSTED1:range = 50000 - 99999 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479180"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + idmap config TRUSTED : backend = rid + idmap config TRUSTED : range = 50000 - 99999 + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479181"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html index 467bc00073..933b2a020c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html @@ -13,19 +13,7 @@ winbindd can allocate for users and groups. If the parameter is absent, Winbind fail over to use the "idmap uid" and "idmap gid" options from smb.conf. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479169"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> - The following example is equivalent to the pre-3.0.25 default idmap - configuration using the "idmap backend = tdb" setting. - </p><pre class="programlisting"> - [global] - idmap domains = ALLDOMAINS - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:default = yes - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:backend = tdb - idmap config ALLDOMAINS:range = 10000 - 50000 - - idmap alloc backend = tdb - idmap alloc config:range = 10000 - 50000 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479191"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479169"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html index 1447d6819d..600c284583 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html @@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="findsmb.1.html" target="_top">findsmb(1)</a></span></dt><dd><p>list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="idmap_ad.8.html" target="_top">idmap_ad(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba's idmap_ad Backend for Winbind +</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="idmap_adex.8.html" target="_top">idmap_adex(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba's idmap_adex Backend for Winbind +</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="idmap_hash.8.html" target="_top">idmap_hash(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba's idmap_hash Backend for Winbind </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="idmap_ldap.8.html" target="_top">idmap_ldap(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba's idmap_ldap Backend for Winbind </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="idmap_nss.8.html" target="_top">idmap_nss(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba's idmap_nss Backend for Winbind </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="idmap_rid.8.html" target="_top">idmap_rid(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba's idmap_rid Backend for Winbind @@ -73,6 +75,8 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="vfs_readonly.8.html" target="_top">vfs_readonly(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>make a Samba share read only for a specified time period </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="vfs_recycle.8.html" target="_top">vfs_recycle(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Samba VFS recycle bin </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="vfs_shadow_copy.8.html" target="_top">vfs_shadow_copy(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Make a Samba share read only for a specified time period +</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html" target="_top">smb_traffic_analyzer(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>log Samba VFS read and write operations through a socket + to a helper application </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="vfs_streams_depot.8.html" target="_top">vfs_streams_depot(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>EXPERIMENTAL module to store alternate data streams in a central directory. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html index 94d7917bd1..a6b25bb896 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html @@ -167,18 +167,20 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. announce the shutdown.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526318"></a><h3>RPC SAMDUMP</h3><p>Print out sam database of remote server. You need to run this against the PDC, from a Samba machine joined as a BDC. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526330"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE</h3><p>Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to local server. You need to run this against the PDC, from a Samba machine joined as a BDC. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526342"></a><h3>RPC GETSID</h3><p>Fetch domain SID and store it in the local <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526359"></a><h3>ADS LEAVE</h3><p>Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526370"></a><h3>ADS STATUS</h3><p>Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526342"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE KEYTAB</h3><p>Dump remote SAM database to local Kerberos keytab file. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526353"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE LDIF</h3><p>Dump remote SAM database to local LDIF file or standard output. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526364"></a><h3>RPC GETSID</h3><p>Fetch domain SID and store it in the local <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526381"></a><h3>ADS LEAVE</h3><p>Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526392"></a><h3>ADS STATUS</h3><p>Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. Prints out quite some debug info. Aimed at developers, regular -users should use <code class="literal">NET ADS TESTJOIN</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526388"></a><h3>ADS PRINTER</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526393"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER INFO [<em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em>] [<em class="replaceable"><code>SERVER</code></em>]</h4><p> +users should use <code class="literal">NET ADS TESTJOIN</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526410"></a><h3>ADS PRINTER</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526416"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER INFO [<em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em>] [<em class="replaceable"><code>SERVER</code></em>]</h4><p> Lookup info for <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em> on <em class="replaceable"><code>SERVER</code></em>. The printer name defaults to "*", the -server name defaults to the local host.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526419"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER PUBLISH <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Publish specified printer using ADS.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526433"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER REMOVE <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Remove specified printer from ADS directory.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526447"></a><h3>ADS SEARCH <em class="replaceable"><code>EXPRESSION</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>ATTRIBUTES...</code></em></h3><p>Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The +server name defaults to the local host.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526442"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER PUBLISH <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Publish specified printer using ADS.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526455"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER REMOVE <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Remove specified printer from ADS directory.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526469"></a><h3>ADS SEARCH <em class="replaceable"><code>EXPRESSION</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>ATTRIBUTES...</code></em></h3><p>Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The expression is a standard LDAP search expression, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results.</p><p>Example: <strong class="userinput"><code>net ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName</code></strong> -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526476"></a><h3>ADS DN <em class="replaceable"><code>DN</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>(attributes)</code></em></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526498"></a><h3>ADS DN <em class="replaceable"><code>DN</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>(attributes)</code></em></h3><p> Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The DN standard LDAP DN, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the result. -</p><p>Example: <strong class="userinput"><code>net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName</code></strong></p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526504"></a><h3>ADS WORKGROUP</h3><p>Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526515"></a><h3>SAM CREATEBUILTINGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p><p>Example: <strong class="userinput"><code>net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName</code></strong></p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526526"></a><h3>ADS WORKGROUP</h3><p>Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526537"></a><h3>SAM CREATEBUILTINGROUP <NAME></h3><p> (Re)Create a BUILTIN group. Only a wellknown set of BUILTIN groups can be created with this command. This is the list of currently recognized group names: Administrators, @@ -188,78 +190,78 @@ compatible Access. This command requires a running Winbindd with idmap allocation properly configured. The group gid will be allocated out of the winbindd range. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526534"></a><h3>SAM CREATELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526556"></a><h3>SAM CREATELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Create a LOCAL group (also known as Alias). This command requires a running Winbindd with idmap allocation properly configured. The group gid will be allocated out of the winbindd range. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526547"></a><h3>SAM DELETELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526570"></a><h3>SAM DELETELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Delete an existing LOCAL group (also known as Alias). -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526559"></a><h3>SAM MAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526581"></a><h3>SAM MAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Map an existing Unix group and make it a Domain Group, the domain group will have the same name. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526571"></a><h3>SAM UNMAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526593"></a><h3>SAM UNMAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Remove an existing group mapping entry. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526582"></a><h3>SAM ADDMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526605"></a><h3>SAM ADDMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> Add a member to a Local group. The group can be specified only by name, the member can be specified by name or SID. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526595"></a><h3>SAM DELMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526618"></a><h3>SAM DELMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> Remove a member from a Local group. The group and the member must be specified by name. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526608"></a><h3>SAM LISTMEM <GROUP></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526630"></a><h3>SAM LISTMEM <GROUP></h3><p> List Local group members. The group must be specified by name. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526619"></a><h3>SAM LIST <users|groups|localgroups|builtin|workstations> [verbose]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526641"></a><h3>SAM LIST <users|groups|localgroups|builtin|workstations> [verbose]</h3><p> List the specified set of accounts by name. If verbose is specified, the rid and description is also provided for each account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526633"></a><h3>SAM SHOW <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526655"></a><h3>SAM SHOW <NAME></h3><p> Show the full DOMAIN\\NAME the SID and the type for the corresponding account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526645"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDIR <NAME> <DIRECTORY></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526667"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDIR <NAME> <DIRECTORY></h3><p> Set the home directory for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526656"></a><h3>SAM SET PROFILEPATH <NAME> <PATH></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526678"></a><h3>SAM SET PROFILEPATH <NAME> <PATH></h3><p> Set the profile path for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526667"></a><h3>SAM SET COMMENT <NAME> <COMMENT></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526689"></a><h3>SAM SET COMMENT <NAME> <COMMENT></h3><p> Set the comment for a user or group account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526678"></a><h3>SAM SET FULLNAME <NAME> <FULL NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526701"></a><h3>SAM SET FULLNAME <NAME> <FULL NAME></h3><p> Set the full name for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526690"></a><h3>SAM SET LOGONSCRIPT <NAME> <SCRIPT></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526712"></a><h3>SAM SET LOGONSCRIPT <NAME> <SCRIPT></h3><p> Set the logon script for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526701"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDRIVE <NAME> <DRIVE></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526723"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDRIVE <NAME> <DRIVE></h3><p> Set the home drive for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526712"></a><h3>SAM SET WORKSTATIONS <NAME> <WORKSTATIONS></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526734"></a><h3>SAM SET WORKSTATIONS <NAME> <WORKSTATIONS></h3><p> Set the workstations a user account is allowed to log in from. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526724"></a><h3>SAM SET DISABLE <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526746"></a><h3>SAM SET DISABLE <NAME></h3><p> Set the "disabled" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526735"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOTREQ <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526757"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOTREQ <NAME></h3><p> Set the "password not required" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526746"></a><h3>SAM SET AUTOLOCK <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526769"></a><h3>SAM SET AUTOLOCK <NAME></h3><p> Set the "autolock" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526758"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOEXP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526780"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOEXP <NAME></h3><p> Set the "password do not expire" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526769"></a><h3>SAM SET PWDMUSTCHANGENOW <NAME> [yes|no]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526791"></a><h3>SAM SET PWDMUSTCHANGENOW <NAME> [yes|no]</h3><p> Set or unset the "password must change" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526781"></a><h3>SAM POLICY LIST</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526803"></a><h3>SAM POLICY LIST</h3><p> List the available account policies. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526792"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SHOW <account policy></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526814"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SHOW <account policy></h3><p> Show the account policy value. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526803"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SET <account policy> <value></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526825"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SET <account policy> <value></h3><p> Set a value for the account policy. Valid values can be: "forever", "never", "off", or a number. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526815"></a><h3>SAM PROVISION</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526838"></a><h3>SAM PROVISION</h3><p> Only available if ldapsam:editposix is set and winbindd is running. Properly populates the ldap tree with the basic accounts (Administrator) and groups (Domain Users, Domain Admins, Domain Guests) on the ldap tree. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526829"></a><h3>IDMAP DUMP <local tdb file name></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526851"></a><h3>IDMAP DUMP <local tdb file name></h3><p> Dumps the mappings contained in the local tdb file specified. This command is useful to dump only the mappings produced by the idmap_tdb backend. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526843"></a><h3>IDMAP RESTORE [input file]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526865"></a><h3>IDMAP RESTORE [input file]</h3><p> Restore the mappings from the specified file or stdin. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526854"></a><h3>IDMAP SECRET <DOMAIN>|ALLOC <secret></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526876"></a><h3>IDMAP SECRET <DOMAIN>|ALLOC <secret></h3><p> Store a secret for the specified domain, used primarily for domains that use idmap_ldap as a backend. In this case the secret is used as the password for the user DN used to bind to the ldap server. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526868"></a><h3>USERSHARE</h3><p>Starting with version 3.0.23, a Samba server now supports the ability for +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2526891"></a><h3>USERSHARE</h3><p>Starting with version 3.0.23, a Samba server now supports the ability for non-root users to add user defined shares to be exported using the "net usershare" commands. </p><p> @@ -288,7 +290,7 @@ can create user defined shares on demand using the commands below. </p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]] - to add or change a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare delete sharename - to delete a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare info [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to print info about a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare list [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to list user defined shares.</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2526927"></a><h4>USERSHARE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[comment]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[acl]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[guest_ok=[y|n]]</code></em></h4><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2478130"></a><h4>USERSHARE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[comment]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[acl]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[guest_ok=[y|n]]</code></em></h4><p> Add or replace a new user defined share, with name "sharename". </p><p> "path" specifies the absolute pathname on the system to be exported. @@ -325,11 +327,11 @@ sharename as the one you wish to modify and specify the new options you wish. The Samba smbd daemon notices user defined share modifications at connect time so will see the change immediately, there is no need to restart smbd on adding, deleting or changing a user defined share. -</div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527001"></a><h4>USERSHARE DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2478204"></a><h4>USERSHARE DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> Deletes the user defined share by name. The Samba smbd daemon immediately notices this change, although it will not disconnect any users currently connected to the deleted share. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527016"></a><h4>USERSHARE INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[wildcard sharename]</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2478220"></a><h4>USERSHARE INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[wildcard sharename]</code></em></h4><p> Get info on user defined shares owned by the current user matching the given pattern, or all users. </p><p> net usershare info on its own dumps out info on the user defined shares that were @@ -348,7 +350,7 @@ guest_ok=n And is a list of the current settings of the user defined share that can be modified by the "net usershare add" command. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527051"></a><h4>USERSHARE LIST <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>wildcard sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527211"></a><h4>USERSHARE LIST <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>wildcard sharename</code></em></h4><p> List all the user defined shares owned by the current user matching the given pattern, or all users. </p><p> net usershare list on its own list out the names of the user defined shares that were @@ -356,7 +358,7 @@ created by the current user, or restricts the list to share names that match the wildcard pattern ('*' matches one or more characters, '?' matches only one character). If the '-l' or '--long' option is also given, it includes the names of user defined shares created by other users. -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2527086"></a><h3>CONF</h3><p>Starting with version 3.2.0, a Samba server can be configured by data +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2527239"></a><h3>CONF</h3><p>Starting with version 3.2.0, a Samba server can be configured by data stored in registry. This configuration data can be edited with the new "net conf" commands. </p><p> @@ -374,10 +376,10 @@ See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry format.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf import - Import configuration from file in smb.conf format.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf listshares - List the registry shares.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf drop - Delete the complete configuration from registry.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf showshare - Show the definition of a registry share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf addshare - Create a new registry share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf delshare - Delete a registry share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf setparm - Store a parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf getparm - Retrieve the value of a parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf delparm - Delete a parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf getincludes - Show the includes of a share definition.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf setincludes - Set includes for a share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf delincludes - Delete includes from a share definition.</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527217"></a><h4>CONF LIST</h4><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527370"></a><h4>CONF LIST</h4><p> Print the configuration data stored in the registry in a smb.conf-like format to standard output. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527229"></a><h4>CONF IMPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>[--test|-T]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[section]</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527382"></a><h4>CONF IMPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>[--test|-T]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[section]</code></em></h4><p> This command imports configuration from a file in smb.conf format. If a section encountered in the input file is present in registry, its contents is replaced. Sections of registry configuration that have @@ -387,30 +389,30 @@ Optionally, a section may be specified to restrict the effect of the import command to that specific section. A test mode is enabled by specifying the parameter "-T" on the commandline. In test mode, no changes are made to the registry, and the resulting configuration is printed to standard output instead. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527259"></a><h4>CONF LISTSHARES</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527412"></a><h4>CONF LISTSHARES</h4><p> List the names of the shares defined in registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527270"></a><h4>CONF DROP</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527423"></a><h4>CONF DROP</h4><p> Delete the complete configuration data from registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527281"></a><h4>CONF SHOWSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527434"></a><h4>CONF SHOWSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> Show the definition of the share or section specified. It is valid to specify "global" as sharename to retrieve the global configuration options from registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527296"></a><h4>CONF ADDSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>writeable={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>guest_ok={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em>]]] </h4><p>Create a new share definition in registry. +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527449"></a><h4>CONF ADDSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>writeable={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>guest_ok={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em>]]] </h4><p>Create a new share definition in registry. The sharename and path have to be given. The share name may <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> be "global". Optionally, values for the very common options "writeable", "guest ok" and a "comment" may be specified. The same result may be obtained by a sequence of "net conf setparm" commands. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527333"></a><h4>CONF DELSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527485"></a><h4>CONF DELSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> Delete a share definition from registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527346"></a><h4>CONF SETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>value</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527498"></a><h4>CONF SETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>value</code></em></h4><p> Store a parameter in registry. The section may be global or a sharename. The section is created if it does not exist yet. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527367"></a><h4>CONF GETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527520"></a><h4>CONF GETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> Show a parameter stored in registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527384"></a><h4>CONF DELPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527537"></a><h4>CONF DELPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> Delete a parameter stored in registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527401"></a><h4>CONF GETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527553"></a><h4>CONF GETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> Get the list of includes for the provided section (global or share). </p><p> Note that due to the nature of the registry database and the nature of include directives, @@ -426,14 +428,14 @@ per share, and this list is evaluated after all the parameters of the share. Further note that currently, only files can be included from registry configuration. In the future, there will be the ability to include configuration data from other registry keys. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527436"></a><h4>CONF SETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>]+</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527589"></a><h4>CONF SETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>]+</h4><p> Set the list of includes for the provided section (global or share) to the given list of one or more filenames. The filenames may contain the usual smb.conf macros like %I. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527456"></a><h4>CONF DELINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2527609"></a><h4>CONF DELINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> Delete the list of includes from the provided section (global or share). -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2527471"></a><h3>HELP [COMMAND]</h3><p>Gives usage information for the specified command.</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2527483"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is complete for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2527494"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2527624"></a><h3>HELP [COMMAND]</h3><p>Gives usage information for the specified command.</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2527636"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is complete for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2527647"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html index d5e3f4948a..369bd563de 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html @@ -2314,140 +2314,138 @@ hosts deny (S) idmap alloc backend (G) </h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537648"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap alloc backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use - when allocating Unix uids/gids for Windows SIDs. This option is - to be used in conjunction with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> - parameter and refers to the name of the idmap module which will provide - the id allocation functionality. Please refer to the man page - for each idmap plugin to determine whether or not the module implements - the allocation feature. The most common plugins are the tdb (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>) - and ldap (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>) libraries. - </p><p>Also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCCONFIG">idmap alloc config</a> option. + when allocating Unix uids/gids for Windows SIDs. This option refers + to the name of the idmap module which will provide the id allocation + functionality. Please refer to the man page for each idmap plugin to + determine whether or not the module implements the allocation feature. + The most common plugins are the tdb (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>) + and ldap (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>) libraries. + </p><p> + This parameter defaults to the value <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a> was set to, so by default winbind will allocate Unix IDs + from the default backend. You will only need to set this parameter + explicitly if you have an external source for Unix IDs, like a central + database service somewhere in your company. + </p><p> + Also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCCONFIG">idmap alloc config</a> option. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap alloc backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537745"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537752"></a> idmap alloc config (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537746"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537753"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap alloc config prefix provides a means of managing settings for the backend defined by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCBACKEND">idmap alloc backend</a> parameter. Refer to the man page for each idmap plugin regarding specific configuration details. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537789"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537796"></a> idmap backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537790"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537797"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use - varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables. This - option is mutually exclusive with the newer and more flexible - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> parameter. The main difference - between the "idmap backend" and the "idmap domains" - is that the former only allows one backend for all domains while the - latter supports configuring backends on a per domain basis. + varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables. + </p><p> + This option specifies the default backend that is used when no special + configuration set by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> matches the + specific request. + </p><p> + This default backend also specifies the place where winbind-generated + idmap entries will be stored. So it is highly recommended that you + specify a writable backend like <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> or <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a> as the idmap backend. The <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_rid.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_rid</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> backends are not writable and thus will generate + unexpected results if set as idmap backend. + </p><p> + To use the rid and ad backends, please specify them via the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> parameter, possibly also for the + domain your machine is member of, specified by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a>. </p><p>Examples of SID/uid/gid backends include tdb (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>), ldap (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>), rid (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_rid.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_rid</span>(8)</span></a>), - and ad (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>). + and ad (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a>). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537884"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537968"></a> idmap cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537885"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537969"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's idmap interface will cache positive SID/uid/gid query results. - </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">900</code> + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800 (one week)</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537927"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538011"></a> idmap config (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537928"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The idmap config prefix provides a means of managing each domain - defined by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> option using Samba's - parametric option support. The idmap config prefix should be - followed by the name of the domain, a colon, and a setting specific to - the chosen backend. There are three options available for all domains: +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538012"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + The idmap config prefix provides a means of managing each trusted + domain separately. The idmap config prefix should be followed by the + name of the domain, a colon, and a setting specific to the chosen + backend. There are three options available for all domains: </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">backend = backend_name</span></dt><dd><p> Specifies the name of the idmap plugin to use as the SID/uid/gid backend for this domain. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">default = [yes|no]</span></dt><dd><p> - The default domain/backend will be used for searching for - users and groups not belonging to one of the explicitly - listed domains (matched by comparing the account SID and the - domain SID). - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">readonly = [yes|no]</span></dt><dd><p> - Mark the domain as readonly which means that no attempts to - allocate a uid or gid (by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCBACKEND">idmap alloc backend</a>) for any user or group in that domain - will be attempted. + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> + Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the + backend is authoritative. Note that the range commonly + matches the allocation range due to the fact that the same + backend will store and retrieve SID/uid/gid mapping entries. + </p><p> + winbind uses this parameter to find the backend that is + authoritative for a unix ID to SID mapping, so it must be set + for each individually configured domain, and it must be + disjoint from the ranges set via <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>. </p></dd></dl></div><p> - The following example illustrates how to configure the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> - for the CORP domain and the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> backend for all other domains. The - TRUSTEDDOMAINS string is simply an arbitrary key used to reference the "idmap - config" settings and does not represent the actual name of a domain. - It is a catchall domain backend for any domain not explicitly listed. + The following example illustrates how to configure the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> for the CORP domain and the + <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> backend for all other + domains. This configuration assumes that the admin of CORP assigns + unix ids below 1000000 via the SFU extensions, and winbind is supposed + to use the next million entries for its own mappings from trusted + domains and for local groups for example. </p><pre class="programlisting"> - idmap domains = CORP TRUSTEDDOMAINS - - idmap config CORP:backend = ad - idmap config CORP:readonly = yes - - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:backend = tdb - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:default = yes - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:range = 1000 - 9999 - </pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538063"></a> + idmap backend = tdb + idmap uid = 1000000-1999999 + idmap gid = 1000000-1999999 -idmap domains (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538064"></a><a name="IDMAPDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The idmap domains option defines a list of Windows domains which will each - have a separately configured backend for managing Winbind's SID/uid/gid - tables. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the older <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a> option. - </p><p> - Values consist of the short domain name for Winbind's primary or collection - of trusted domains. You may also use an arbitrary string to represent a catchall - domain backend for any domain not explicitly listed. - </p><p> - Refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> for details about - managing the SID/uid/gid backend for each domain. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap domains</code></em> = <code class="literal">default AD CORP</code> -</em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538148"></a> + idmap config CORP : backend = ad + idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999 + </pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538143"></a> <a name="WINBINDGID"></a>winbind gid -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538149"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538179"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538144"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538174"></a> idmap gid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538180"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538175"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can - occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> options. + occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a>, and + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> options. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538278"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538261"></a> idmap negative cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538279"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538262"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's idmap interface will cache negative SID/uid/gid query results. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap negative cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538321"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538304"></a> <a name="WINBINDUID"></a>winbind uid -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538322"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538353"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538306"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538335"></a> idmap uid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538354"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538336"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs. This range of ids should have no existing local - or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> options. + or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a> and + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> options. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538450"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538421"></a> include (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538451"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538422"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed in place. </p><p> @@ -2465,10 +2463,10 @@ include (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>include</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538551"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538522"></a> inherit acls (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538552"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538523"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a new file or subdirectory in these parent directories. The default behavior is to use the unix mode specified when creating the directory. @@ -2476,10 +2474,10 @@ inherit acls (S) default directory acls are propagated. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538598"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538569"></a> inherit owner (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538599"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538570"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories is normally governed by effective uid of the connected user. This option allows the Samba administrator to specify that the ownership for new files and directories should be controlled @@ -2488,10 +2486,10 @@ inherit owner (S) delete them and to ensure that newly create files in a user's roaming profile directory are actually owner by the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit owner</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538651"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538622"></a> inherit permissions (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538652"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538623"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE">force create mode</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE">force directory mode</a> but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this. </p><p>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, @@ -2503,10 +2501,33 @@ inherit permissions (S) many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538799"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538770"></a> + +init logon delayed hosts (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538771"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter takes a list of host names, addresses or networks for + which the initial samlogon reply should be delayed (so other DCs get + preferred by XP workstations if there are any). + </p><p> + The length of the delay can be specified with the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAY">init logon delay</a> parameter. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> +</em></span> +</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.de</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538847"></a> + +init logon delay (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538848"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter specifies a delay in milliseconds for the hosts configured + for delayed initial samlogon with + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS">init logon delayed hosts</a>. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538901"></a> interfaces (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538800"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538902"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT) traffic. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any @@ -2530,10 +2551,10 @@ interfaces (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> = <code class="literal">eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538915"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539018"></a> invalid users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538916"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539019"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service. This is really a <span class="emphasis"><em>paranoid</em></span> check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security.</p><p>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS @@ -2553,10 +2574,10 @@ invalid users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">root fred admin @wheel</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539029"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539132"></a> iprint server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539030"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539133"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">iprint</code>. </p><p> If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is @@ -2565,10 +2586,10 @@ iprint server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>iprint server</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYCUPSSERVER</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539115"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539218"></a> keepalive (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539116"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539220"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between <em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether @@ -2578,20 +2599,20 @@ Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</p><p>Defa </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539202"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539306"></a> kernel change notify (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539203"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539307"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes. </p><p>This parameter is only used when your kernel supports change notification to user programs using the inotify interface. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539252"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539355"></a> kernel oplocks (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539253"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539356"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</p><p>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <em class="parameter"><code>oplocks </code></em> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation @@ -2601,10 +2622,10 @@ kernel oplocks (G) to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support. You should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539339"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539443"></a> lanman auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539340"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539444"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate users or permit password changes using the LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, but not @@ -2621,10 +2642,10 @@ lanman auth (G) permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539432"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539535"></a> large readwrite (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539433"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539536"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs @@ -2633,10 +2654,10 @@ large readwrite (G) performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not as tested as some other Samba code paths.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>large readwrite</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539488"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539598"></a> ldap admin dn (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539489"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539599"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a> defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a> is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb</code> @@ -2644,10 +2665,10 @@ ldap admin dn (G) man page for more information on how to accomplish this. </p><p> The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a> requires a fully specified DN. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> is not appended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a>. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539597"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539707"></a> ldap connection timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539598"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539708"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter tells the LDAP library calls which timeout in seconds they should honor during initial connection establishments to LDAP servers. It is very useful in failover scenarios in particular. If one or more LDAP @@ -2659,10 +2680,10 @@ ldap connection timeout (G) and not establishing an initial connection. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539662"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539772"></a> ldap debug level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539663"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539773"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls the debug level of the LDAP library calls. In the case of OpenLDAP, it is the same bit-field as understood by the server and documented in the @@ -2679,10 +2700,10 @@ ldap debug level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug level</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539750"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539860"></a> ldap debug threshold (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539751"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539861"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls the Samba debug level at which the ldap library debug output is printed in the Samba logs. See the description of @@ -2691,28 +2712,28 @@ ldap debug threshold (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug threshold</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539817"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539927"></a> ldap delete dn (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539818"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539928"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap delete dn</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539860"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539971"></a> ldap group suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539861"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539972"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Groups</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539944"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540054"></a> ldap idmap suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539945"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540055"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. @@ -2720,10 +2741,10 @@ ldap idmap suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap idmap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Idmap</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540026"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540136"></a> ldap machine suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540027"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540138"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. @@ -2731,10 +2752,10 @@ ldap machine suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap machine suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Computers</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540108"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540218"></a> ldap passwd sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540109"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540219"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA. @@ -2745,10 +2766,10 @@ ldap passwd sync (G) LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Only</code></em> = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest.</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap passwd sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540208"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540319"></a> ldap replication sleep (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540210"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540320"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When Samba is asked to write to a read-only LDAP replica, we are redirected to talk to the read-write master server. This server then replicates our changes back to the 'local' server, however the replication might take some seconds, especially over slow links. Certain client activities, particularly domain joins, can become confused by the 'success' @@ -2761,10 +2782,10 @@ ldap replication sleep (G) The value is specified in milliseconds, the maximum value is 5000 (5 seconds). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap replication sleep</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540272"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540382"></a> ldapsam:editposix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540273"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540383"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Editposix is an option that leverages ldapsam:trusted to make it simpler to manage a domain controller eliminating the need to set up custom scripts to add and manage the posix users and groups. This option will instead directly manipulate the ldap tree to create, remove and modify user and group entries. @@ -2842,10 +2863,10 @@ ldapsam:editposix (G) </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:editposix</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540409"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540508"></a> ldapsam:trusted (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540410"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540509"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> By default, Samba as a Domain Controller with an LDAP backend needs to use the Unix-style NSS subsystem to access user and group information. Due to the way Unix stores user information in /etc/passwd and /etc/group this inevitably leads to inefficiencies. One important question a user needs to know is the list of groups he @@ -2863,10 +2884,10 @@ ldapsam:trusted (G) is easily achieved. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:trusted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540498"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540597"></a> ldap ssl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540499"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540598"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> related to Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the @@ -2880,10 +2901,10 @@ ldap ssl (G) to configure. See <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSDBBACKEND">passdb backend</a></p>. </li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl</code></em> = <code class="literal">start_tls</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540637"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540736"></a> ldap suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540638"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540738"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p> The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPUSERSUFFIX">ldap user suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPGROUPSUFFIX">ldap group suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPMACHINESUFFIX">ldap machine suffix</a>, and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX">ldap idmap suffix</a>. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the @@ -2892,19 +2913,19 @@ ldap suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">dc=samba,dc=org</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540760"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540859"></a> ldap timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540761"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540860"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When Samba connects to an ldap server that server may be down or unreachable. To prevent Samba from hanging whilst waiting for the connection this parameter specifies in seconds how long Samba should wait before failing the connect. The default is to only wait fifteen seconds for the ldap server to respond to the connect request. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540806"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540905"></a> ldap user suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540807"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540906"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. @@ -2912,10 +2933,10 @@ ldap user suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap user suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=people</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540888"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540987"></a> level2 oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540889"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540988"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</p><p>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead @@ -2935,10 +2956,10 @@ level2 oplocks (S) parameter must be set to <code class="constant">yes</code> on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>level2 oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540995"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541094"></a> lm announce (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540996"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541095"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three values, <code class="constant">yes</code>, <code class="constant">no</code>, or @@ -2954,10 +2975,10 @@ lm announce (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541117"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541216"></a> lm interval (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541118"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541217"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE">lm announce</a> parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be @@ -2967,18 +2988,18 @@ lm interval (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm interval</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541201"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541301"></a> load printers (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541202"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541302"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERS">printers</a> section for more details.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>load printers</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541258"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541357"></a> local master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541259"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541358"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser on a subnet. If set to <code class="constant">no</code> then <code class="literal"> nmbd</code> will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By @@ -2988,13 +3009,13 @@ local master (G) will <span class="emphasis"><em>participate</em></span> in elections for local master browser.</p><p>Setting this value to <code class="constant">no</code> will cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> <span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span> to become a local master browser.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>local master</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541358"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541458"></a> <a name="LOCKDIR"></a>lock dir -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541359"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541390"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541459"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541490"></a> lock directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541391"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541491"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXCONNECTIONS">max connections</a> option. </p><p> @@ -3004,10 +3025,10 @@ lock directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541468"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541568"></a> locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541470"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541569"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client.</p><p>If <code class="literal">locking = no</code>, all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report @@ -3017,18 +3038,18 @@ locking (S) CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <code class="constant">no</code> is not really recommended even in this case.</p><p>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. - You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541544"></a> + You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541644"></a> lock spin count (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541545"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541645"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24. The functionality it contolled is now controlled by the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINTIME">lock spin time</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin count</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541600"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541700"></a> lock spin time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541601"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in microseconds that smbd should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541701"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in microseconds that smbd should keep waiting to see if a failed lock request can be granted. This parameter has changed in default value from Samba 3.0.23 from 10 to 200. The associated @@ -3036,22 +3057,22 @@ lock spin time (G) no longer used in Samba 3.0.24. You should not need to change the value of this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin time</code></em> = <code class="literal">200</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541659"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541759"></a> log file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541660"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541760"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file). </p><p> This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/var/log.%m</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541711"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541811"></a> <a name="DEBUGLEVEL"></a>debuglevel -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541712"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541742"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541812"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541842"></a> log level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541743"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541843"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. </p><p>This parameter has been extended since the 2.2.x @@ -3062,10 +3083,10 @@ log level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541975"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542074"></a> logon drive (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541976"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542076"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be connected (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME">logon home</a>) and is only used by NT Workstations. @@ -3075,10 +3096,10 @@ logon drive (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon drive</code></em> = <code class="literal">h:</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542049"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542149"></a> logon home (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542050"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542150"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to do </p><p> @@ -3109,10 +3130,10 @@ logon home (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\remote_smb_server\%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542214"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542314"></a> logon path (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542215"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542315"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles (Desktop, NTuser.dat, etc) are stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the @@ -3156,10 +3177,10 @@ logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon path</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\%N\%U\profile</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542382"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542482"></a> logon script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542383"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542484"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the batch file (<code class="filename">.bat</code>) or NT command file (<code class="filename">.cmd</code>) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended. @@ -3190,10 +3211,10 @@ logon script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon script</code></em> = <code class="literal">scripts\%U.bat</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542552"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542652"></a> lppause command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542553"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542653"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way @@ -3217,10 +3238,10 @@ lppause command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lppause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542699"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542800"></a> lpq cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542700"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542801"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the <code class="literal">lpq</code> command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <code class="literal"> lpq</code> command used by the system, so if you use different @@ -3233,10 +3254,10 @@ lpq cache time (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542819"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542919"></a> lpq command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542820"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542920"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain <code class="literal">lpq </code>-style printer status information.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer @@ -3258,10 +3279,10 @@ lpq command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpq -P%p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542945"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543045"></a> lpresume command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542946"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543046"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See @@ -3274,10 +3295,10 @@ lpresume command (S) parameter is <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, in which case the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">lp -i %p-%j -H resume</code></p><p>or if the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter is <code class="constant">SOFTQ</code>, then the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">qstat -s -j%j -r</code></p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543098"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543198"></a> lprm command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543099"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543199"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with @@ -3294,10 +3315,10 @@ lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> = <code class="literal"> determined by printing parameter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543185"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543285"></a> machine password timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543186"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543286"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = domain</a> parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb </code>. This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one @@ -3307,10 +3328,10 @@ machine password timeout (G) and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = domain</a> parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>machine password timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543272"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543372"></a> magic output (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543273"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543374"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICSCRIPT">magic script</a> parameter below). </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>If two clients use the same <em class="parameter"><code>magic script @@ -3319,10 +3340,10 @@ magic output (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal">myfile.txt</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543356"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543456"></a> magic script (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543357"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543458"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user.</p><p>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon @@ -3338,10 +3359,10 @@ magic script (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic script</code></em> = <code class="literal">user.csh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543462"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543562"></a> mangled names (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543463"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543563"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING">name mangling</a> for details on how to control the mangling process.</p><p>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters @@ -3366,10 +3387,10 @@ mangled names (S) from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names do not change between sessions.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangled names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543598"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543699"></a> mangle prefix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543599"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543700"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum @@ -3379,20 +3400,20 @@ mangle prefix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangle prefix</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543665"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543765"></a> mangling char (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543666"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543766"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as the <span class="emphasis"><em>magic</em></span> character in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING">name mangling</a>. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer. This is effective only when mangling method is hash.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">~</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">^</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543742"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543843"></a> mangling method (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543743"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543844"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2". "hash" is the algorithm that was used used in Samba for many years and was the default in Samba 2.2.x "hash2" is @@ -3403,10 +3424,10 @@ mangling method (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling method</code></em> = <code class="literal">hash</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543809"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543910"></a> map acl inherit (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543810"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543911"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user.SAMBA_PAI. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and @@ -3414,10 +3435,10 @@ map acl inherit (S) POSIX ACL mapping code. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map acl inherit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543866"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543967"></a> map archive (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543867"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543968"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One @@ -3430,19 +3451,19 @@ map archive (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map archive</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543941"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544042"></a> map hidden (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543942"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544043"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit. </p><p> Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> for details. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543999"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544100"></a> map read only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544000"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544101"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from a UNIX filesystem. </p><p> This parameter can take three different values, which tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> how to display the read only attribute on files, where either @@ -3467,10 +3488,10 @@ map read only (S) the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES">store dos attributes</a> method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs. </p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544164"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544257"></a> map system (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544165"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544258"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit. </p><p> Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> to be set such that the group @@ -3478,10 +3499,10 @@ map system (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map system</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544233"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544326"></a> map to guest (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544234"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">SECURITY = +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544327"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">SECURITY = security</a> modes other than <em class="parameter"><code>security = share</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>security = server</code></em> - i.e. <code class="constant">user</code>, and <code class="constant">domain</code>.</p><p>This parameter can take four different values, which tell @@ -3523,10 +3544,10 @@ map to guest (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map to guest</code></em> = <code class="literal">Bad User</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544473"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544565"></a> max connections (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544474"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544566"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. If <em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</p><p>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files will be stored in @@ -3534,10 +3555,10 @@ max connections (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544559"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544651"></a> max disk size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544560"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544652"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in size.</p><p>Note that this option does not limit the amount of @@ -3551,10 +3572,10 @@ max disk size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max disk size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544650"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544743"></a> max log size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544651"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544744"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a <code class="filename">.old</code> extension. @@ -3563,17 +3584,17 @@ max log size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max log size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544722"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544814"></a> max mux (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544723"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544816"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max mux</code></em> = <code class="literal">50</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544765"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544858"></a> max open files (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544766"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544859"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> file serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses @@ -3581,23 +3602,23 @@ max open files (G) by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max open files</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544825"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544918"></a> max print jobs (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544826"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544919"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will remote "Out of Space" to the client. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">5000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544895"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544987"></a> <a name="PROTOCOL"></a>protocol -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544896"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544927"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544988"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545020"></a> max protocol (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544928"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545021"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server.</p><p>Possible values are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">CORE</code>: Earliest version. No concept of user names.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">COREPLUS</code>: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">LANMAN1</code>: First <span class="emphasis"><em> @@ -3609,10 +3630,10 @@ max protocol (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">LANMAN1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545052"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545144"></a> max reported print jobs (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545053"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545146"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of @@ -3621,10 +3642,10 @@ max reported print jobs (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max reported print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545116"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545208"></a> max smbd processes (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545117"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545210"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each user will have an <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> associated with him or her to handle connections to all @@ -3632,10 +3653,10 @@ max smbd processes (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max smbd processes</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545197"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545290"></a> max stat cache size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545198"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545291"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any <em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> being used to speed up case insensitive name mappings. It represents the number of kilobyte (1024) units the stat cache can use. @@ -3646,27 +3667,27 @@ max stat cache size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max stat cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545267"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545359"></a> max ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545268"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545360"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when <code class="literal">nmbd</code> is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">259200</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545326"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545418"></a> max wins ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545327"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545419"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT">wins support = yes</a>) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">518400</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545397"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545489"></a> max xmit (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545398"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545490"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 16644, which matches the behavior of Windows 2000. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. You should never need to change this parameter from its default value. @@ -3674,10 +3695,10 @@ max xmit (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max xmit</code></em> = <code class="literal">8192</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545460"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545552"></a> message command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545461"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545553"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message.</p><p>This would normally be a command that would deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination.</p><p>An example is: @@ -3716,20 +3737,20 @@ message command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>message command</code></em> = <code class="literal">csh -c 'xedit %s; rm %s' &</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545670"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545762"></a> min print space (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545671"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545763"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print job.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">2000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545732"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545825"></a> min protocol (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545733"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545826"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a> parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description @@ -3741,10 +3762,10 @@ min protocol (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545830"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545923"></a> min receivefile size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545831"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545924"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming SMBwriteX call on a non-signed SMB/CIFS connection greater than this value will not be processed in the normal way but will be passed to any underlying kernel recvfile or splice system call (if there is no such call Samba will emulate in user space). This allows zero-copy writes directly from network @@ -3753,19 +3774,19 @@ but user testing is recommended. If set to zero Samba processes SMBwriteX calls normal way. To enable POSIX large write support (SMB/CIFS writes up to 16Mb) this option must be nonzero. The maximum value is 128k. Values greater than 128k will be silently set to 128k.</p><p>Note this option will have NO EFFECT if set on a SMB signed connection.</p><p>The default is zero, which diables this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min receivefile size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545900"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545992"></a> min wins ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545901"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545993"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT">wins support = yes</a>) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">21600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545970"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546062"></a> msdfs proxy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545971"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546063"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using @@ -3773,10 +3794,10 @@ msdfs proxy (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT">msdfs root</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS">host msdfs</a> options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">\otherserver\someshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546048"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546140"></a> msdfs root (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546049"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546142"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic @@ -3784,20 +3805,20 @@ msdfs root (S) and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs root</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546103"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546196"></a> name cache timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546104"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546197"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out. If the timeout is set to 0. the caching is disabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">660</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546164"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546257"></a> name resolve order (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546166"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546258"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name resolution is performed. The option takes a space @@ -3828,10 +3849,10 @@ name resolve order (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name resolve order</code></em> = <code class="literal">lmhosts bcast host</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546366"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546458"></a> netbios aliases (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546367"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546459"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon @@ -3841,10 +3862,10 @@ netbios aliases (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios aliases</code></em> = <code class="literal">TEST TEST1 TEST2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546431"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546524"></a> netbios name (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546432"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546525"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under. @@ -3857,17 +3878,17 @@ netbios name (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios name</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYNAME</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546513"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546605"></a> netbios scope (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546514"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546606"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios scope</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546556"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546648"></a> nis homedir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546557"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546649"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote server. </p><p>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory @@ -3886,20 +3907,20 @@ nis homedir (G) NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nis homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546636"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546728"></a> nt acl support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546637"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546729"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. The UNIX permissions considered are the the traditional UNIX owner and group permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or directories. This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to 2.2.2.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt acl support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546691"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546783"></a> ntlm auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546692"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546784"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response. If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response will need to be sent by the client.</p><p>If this option, and <code class="literal">lanman @@ -3907,33 +3928,33 @@ ntlm auth (G) permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ntlm auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546755"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546847"></a> nt pipe support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546756"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546848"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <code class="constant">IPC$</code> pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt pipe support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546811"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546904"></a> nt status support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546812"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546905"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone. If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2.2.3 reported.</p><p>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt status support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546872"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546965"></a> null passwords (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546873"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546966"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546925"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547018"></a> obey pam restrictions (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546926"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547019"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only @@ -3943,10 +3964,10 @@ obey pam restrictions (G) authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>obey pam restrictions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546989"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547082"></a> only user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546990"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547083"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling @@ -3959,10 +3980,10 @@ only user (S) will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>only user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547078"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547171"></a> oplock break wait time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547079"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547172"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can fail and not respond to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount @@ -3971,10 +3992,10 @@ oplock break wait time (G) DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock break wait time</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547133"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547232"></a> oplock contention limit (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547134"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547233"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a <span class="emphasis"><em>very</em></span> advanced <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file. </p><p> @@ -3986,10 +4007,10 @@ oplock contention limit (S) DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock contention limit</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547215"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547314"></a> oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547216"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547315"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option tells <code class="literal">smbd</code> whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve @@ -4008,10 +4029,10 @@ oplocks (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS">kernel oplocks</a> parameter for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547315"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547414"></a> os2 driver map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547316"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547415"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</p><p><nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>.<device name></p><p>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver would appear as <code class="literal">HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP @@ -4021,10 +4042,10 @@ os2 driver map (G) details on OS/2 clients, please refer to chapter on other clients in the Samba3-HOWTO book. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os2 driver map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547381"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547481"></a> os level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547382"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547482"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this parameter determines whether <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> in the local broadcast area. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em> @@ -4040,10 +4061,10 @@ os level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os level</code></em> = <code class="literal">65</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547490"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547580"></a> pam password change (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547491"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547581"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in @@ -4051,20 +4072,20 @@ pam password change (G) It should be possible to enable this without changing your <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDCHAT">passwd chat</a> parameter for most setups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pam password change</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547561"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547652"></a> panic action (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547562"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547653"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> or <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal">"/bin/sleep 90000"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547637"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547728"></a> paranoid server security (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547638"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547729"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest users with a bad passowrd. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4.x server as password server, but instead complain to the logs and exit. @@ -4072,10 +4093,10 @@ paranoid server security (G) this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a bad logon to the remote server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>paranoid server security</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547688"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547779"></a> passdb backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547689"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547780"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend will be used for storing user and possibly group information. This allows you to swap between different storage mechanisms without recompile. </p><p>The parameter value is divided into two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated @@ -4108,19 +4129,19 @@ or multi server LDAP URL with Netscape based LDAP library: passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap-2.example.com" </pre><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547844"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547935"></a> passdb expand explicit (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547845"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547936"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %-macros in the passdb fields if they are explicitly set. We used to expand macros here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client can expand a variable %G_osver% in which %G would have been substituted by the user's primary group. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb expand explicit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547891"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547982"></a> passwd chat debug (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547892"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547983"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in <span class="emphasis"><em>debug</em></span> mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> log with a @@ -4133,18 +4154,18 @@ passwd chat debug (G) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE">pam password change</a> parameter is set. This parameter is off by default.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat debug</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547994"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548085"></a> passwd chat timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547995"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548086"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial answer from a passwd chat script being run. Once the initial answer is received the subsequent answers must be received in one tenth of this time. The default it two seconds.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548039"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548130"></a> passwd chat (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548040"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548131"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> conversation that takes places between <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and the local password changing program to change the user's password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> uses to determine what to send to the @@ -4175,10 +4196,10 @@ passwd chat (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> = <code class="literal">"*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548243"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548334"></a> passwd program (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548244"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548335"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program.</p><p>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <span class="emphasis"><em>reasonable @@ -4199,10 +4220,10 @@ passwd program (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> = <code class="literal">/bin/passwd %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548378"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548469"></a> password level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548379"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548470"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when @@ -4224,10 +4245,10 @@ password level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548515"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548614"></a> password server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548516"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548615"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server or Active Directory domain controller with this option, and using <code class="literal">security = [ads|domain|server]</code> it is possible to get Samba to @@ -4287,13 +4308,13 @@ password server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> = <code class="literal">windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548814"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548913"></a> <a name="DIRECTORY"></a>directory -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548815"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548845"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548914"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548944"></a> path (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548846"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548945"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing.</p><p>For a printable service offering guest access, the service @@ -4310,19 +4331,19 @@ path (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/fred</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548949"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549048"></a> pid directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548950"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549049"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">pid directory = /var/run/</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549009"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549108"></a> posix locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549010"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549109"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are @@ -4330,10 +4351,10 @@ posix locking (S) method (e.g. NFS or local file access). You should never need to disable this parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>posix locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549064"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549163"></a> postexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549065"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549164"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some systems.</p><p>An interesting example may be to unmount server @@ -4341,21 +4362,21 @@ postexec (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549137"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549236"></a> preexec close (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549138"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549237"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXEC">preexec</a> should close the service being connected to. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549191"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549290"></a> <a name="EXEC"></a>exec -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549192"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549222"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549292"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549322"></a> preexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549224"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549323"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</p><p>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:</p><p> @@ -4367,13 +4388,13 @@ preexec (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549331"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549429"></a> <a name="PREFEREDMASTER"></a>prefered master -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549332"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549364"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549430"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549462"></a> preferred master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549365"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549463"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> is a preferred master browser for its workgroup. </p><p> If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, on startup, <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will force @@ -4387,22 +4408,22 @@ preferred master (G) capabilities. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preferred master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549457"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549556"></a> preload modules (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549458"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549557"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549517"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549616"></a> <a name="AUTOSERVICES"></a>auto services -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549518"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549550"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549617"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549650"></a> preload (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549551"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549651"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible.</p><p> @@ -4413,33 +4434,33 @@ preload (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred lp colorlp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549628"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549728"></a> preserve case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549629"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549729"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE">default case</a>. </p><p> See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a> for a fuller discussion. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549694"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549794"></a> <a name="PRINTOK"></a>print ok -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549696"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549725"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549795"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549825"></a> printable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549726"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549826"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service. </p><p>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a> parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549788"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549888"></a> printcap cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549789"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549889"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing subsystem is again asked for the known printers. If the value is greater than 60 the initial waiting time is set to 60 seconds to allow an earlier first rescan of the printing subsystem. @@ -4449,13 +4470,13 @@ printcap cache time (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549856"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549956"></a> <a name="PRINTCAP"></a>printcap -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549857"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549889"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549957"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549989"></a> printcap name (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549890"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549990"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <code class="filename"> /etc/printcap</code>). See the discussion of the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section">[printers]</a> section above for reasons why you might want to do this. </p><p> @@ -4490,10 +4511,10 @@ print5|My Printer 5 </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap name</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/myprintcap</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550074"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550173"></a> print command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550075"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550174"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a <code class="literal">system()</code> call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there @@ -4535,10 +4556,10 @@ print command (S) and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command will be ignored.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550344"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550443"></a> printer admin (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550345"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550444"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This lists users who can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation). @@ -4554,13 +4575,13 @@ printer admin (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer admin</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, @staff</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550413"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550513"></a> <a name="PRINTER"></a>printer -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550414"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550444"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550514"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550544"></a> printer name (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550445"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550545"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent. </p><p> @@ -4573,10 +4594,10 @@ printer name (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> = <code class="literal">laserwriter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550532"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550632"></a> printing (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550533"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status information is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550633"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the default values for the <em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lppause command </code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em>, and <em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> if specified in the [global] section.</p><p>Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are @@ -4590,27 +4611,27 @@ printing (S) commands (e.g. print command, lpq command, etc...) after defining the value for the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> option since it will reset the printing commands to default values.</p><p>See also the discussion in the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section"> - [printers]</a> section.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550667"></a> + [printers]</a> section.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550767"></a> printjob username (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550668"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550768"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be passed to the printing system. Usually, the username is sent, but in some cases, e.g. the domain prefix is useful, too.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%U</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%D\%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550728"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550828"></a> private dir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550730"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550829"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code> and <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>private dir</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550782"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550882"></a> profile acls (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550784"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550883"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service @@ -4638,10 +4659,10 @@ profile acls (S) tree to the owning user. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>profile acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550855"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550955"></a> queuepause command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550856"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550956"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</p><p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, @@ -4652,10 +4673,10 @@ queuepause command (S) path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queuepause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">disable %p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550932"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551031"></a> queueresume command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550933"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551032"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND">queuepause command</a>).</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes @@ -4670,10 +4691,10 @@ queueresume command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queueresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">enable %p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551034"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551133"></a> read list (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551035"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551134"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a> option is set to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INVALIDUSERS">invalid users</a> @@ -4683,19 +4704,19 @@ read list (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read list</code></em> = <code class="literal">mary, @students</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551133"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551233"></a> read only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551134"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551234"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory.</p><p>Note that a printable service (<code class="literal">printable = yes</code>) will <span class="emphasis"><em>ALWAYS</em></span> allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551210"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551310"></a> read raw (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551211"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551311"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients.</p><p>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit. @@ -4704,20 +4725,20 @@ read raw (G) sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</p><p>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left severely alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551270"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551370"></a> realm (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551271"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551371"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 <code class="literal">domain</code>. It is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal">mysambabox.mycompany.com</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551335"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551435"></a> registry shares (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551336"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551436"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This turns on or off support for share definitions read from registry. Shares defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> take precedence over shares with the same name defined in @@ -4732,10 +4753,10 @@ registry shares (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551421"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551521"></a> remote announce (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551422"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551522"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name. </p><p> @@ -4759,10 +4780,10 @@ remote announce (G) See the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-HOWTO book. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote announce</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551526"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551626"></a> remote browse sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551527"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551627"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to @@ -4794,10 +4815,10 @@ remote browse sync (G) each network has its own WINS server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote browse sync</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551639"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551744"></a> rename user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551640"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551745"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run as root by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> under special circumstances described below. </p><p> When a user with admin authority or SeAddUserPrivilege rights renames a user (e.g.: from the NT4 User Manager @@ -4815,10 +4836,10 @@ rename user script (G) needs to change for other applications using the same directory. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>rename user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551729"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551834"></a> reset on zero vc (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551730"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551835"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option controls whether an incoming session setup should kill other connections coming from the same IP. This matches the default Windows 2003 behaviour. @@ -4837,10 +4858,10 @@ reset on zero vc (G) </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>reset on zero vc</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551781"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551898"></a> restrict anonymous (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551782"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551899"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group list information is returned for an anonymous connection. and mirrors the effects of the </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -4863,16 +4884,16 @@ HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\ by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok = yes</a> on any share. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>restrict anonymous</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551873"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551982"></a> <a name="ROOT"></a>root -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551874"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551906"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551983"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552015"></a> <a name="ROOTDIR"></a>root dir -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551907"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551938"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552016"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552046"></a> root directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551939"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552048"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. @@ -4895,34 +4916,34 @@ root directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/homes/smb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552062"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552170"></a> root postexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552063"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552172"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552110"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552219"></a> root preexec close (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552112"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552220"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close </code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552159"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552268"></a> root preexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552160"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552269"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552207"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552316"></a> security mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552208"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552317"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> @@ -4941,10 +4962,10 @@ security mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0770</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552314"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552422"></a> security (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552315"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552423"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <code class="filename"> smb.conf</code> file.</p><p>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide @@ -5068,10 +5089,10 @@ security (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> = <code class="literal">DOMAIN</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553192"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553301"></a> server schannel (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553194"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553302"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL">server schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL">server schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL">server schannel = yes</a> denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4. @@ -5082,10 +5103,10 @@ server schannel (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553308"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553417"></a> server signing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553309"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the server offers or requires +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553418"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the server offers or requires the client it talks to to use SMB signing. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. @@ -5093,10 +5114,10 @@ server signing (G) When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Disabled</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553370"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553478"></a> server string (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553371"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553479"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in <code class="literal">net view</code>. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users.</p><p>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine name.</p><p>A <em class="parameter"><code>%v</code></em> will be replaced with the Samba @@ -5105,10 +5126,10 @@ server string (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server string</code></em> = <code class="literal">University of GNUs Samba Server</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553461"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553570"></a> set directory (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553462"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553571"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If <code class="literal">set directory = no</code>, then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory. </p><p> @@ -5117,10 +5138,10 @@ set directory (S) for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553521"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553630"></a> set primary group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553522"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553631"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups. This script sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the primary group from the windows user @@ -5132,10 +5153,10 @@ set primary group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set primary group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553603"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553712"></a> set quota command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553604"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553713"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available if Samba was configured with the argument <code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> or on linux when <code class="literal">./configure --with-quotas</code> was used and a working quota api @@ -5145,10 +5166,10 @@ set quota command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/set_quota</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553766"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553875"></a> share modes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553767"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553876"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of the <em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> during a file open. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access to a file.</p><p>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so @@ -5161,20 +5182,20 @@ share modes (S) by default.</p><p>You should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553860"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553969"></a> short preserve case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553861"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553970"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE">default case</a>. This option can be use with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE">preserve case = yes</a> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered. </p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>short preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553939"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554048"></a> show add printer wizard (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553940"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554050"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is @@ -5192,10 +5213,10 @@ show add printer wizard (G) </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer.</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>show add printer wizard</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554023"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554132"></a> shutdown script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554024"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554133"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that should start a shutdown procedure.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>, right, this command will be run as user.</p><p>The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%z</code></em> will be substituted with the @@ -5220,10 +5241,10 @@ let "time++" </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554177"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554285"></a> smb encrypt (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554178"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554286"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an extension to the SMB/CIFS protocol negotiated as part of the UNIX extensions. SMB encryption uses the GSSAPI (SSPI on Windows) ability to encrypt and sign every request/response in a SMB protocol stream. When @@ -5252,10 +5273,10 @@ smb encrypt (S) When set to mandatory, SMB encryption is required and if set to disabled, SMB encryption can not be negotiated.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb encrypt</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554283"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554402"></a> smb passwd file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554284"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554403"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.</p><p> An example of use is: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -5263,15 +5284,15 @@ smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb passwd file</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private/smbpasswd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554337"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554456"></a> smb ports (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554338"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554457"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554378"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554498"></a> socket address (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554380"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554499"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each with a different configuration.</p><p>By default Samba will accept connections on any @@ -5279,10 +5300,10 @@ socket address (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket address</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.168.2.20</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554444"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554563"></a> socket options (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554445"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554564"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client.</p><p>Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned.</p><p>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server @@ -5310,17 +5331,17 @@ socket options (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket options</code></em> = <code class="literal">IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554654"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554773"></a> stat cache (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554655"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554774"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554705"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554824"></a> store dos attributes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554706"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554825"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or READ-ONLY) from a filesystem extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX permission bits (such as occurs with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY">map readonly</a>). When set, DOS @@ -5332,10 +5353,10 @@ store dos attributes (S) extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>store dos attributes</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554827"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554946"></a> strict allocate (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554828"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554947"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour @@ -5347,10 +5368,10 @@ strict allocate (S) out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota of users.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict allocate</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554897"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555016"></a> strict locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554898"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555017"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems. @@ -5366,10 +5387,10 @@ strict locking (S) <code class="literal">strict locking = no</code> is acceptable. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">Auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554976"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555095"></a> strict sync (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554977"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555096"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in @@ -5383,10 +5404,10 @@ strict sync (S) addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555041"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555160"></a> svcctl list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555042"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555161"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd will use for starting and stopping Unix services via the Win32 ServiceControl API. This allows Windows administrators to utilize the MS Management Console plug-ins to manage a @@ -5399,10 +5420,10 @@ svcctl list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>svcctl list</code></em> = <code class="literal">cups postfix portmap httpd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555126"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555245"></a> sync always (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555127"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555246"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is <code class="constant">no</code> then the server will be guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can @@ -5413,19 +5434,19 @@ sync always (S) <code class="constant">yes</code> in order for this parameter to have any affect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>sync always</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555197"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555316"></a> syslog only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555198"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555317"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files. There still will be some logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555244"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555363"></a> syslog (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555245"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555364"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog <code class="constant">LOG_ERR</code>, debug level one maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_WARNING</code>, debug level two maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_NOTICE</code>, @@ -5436,10 +5457,10 @@ syslog (G) logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555315"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555434"></a> template homedir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555316"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555435"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. If the string <em class="parameter"><code>%D</code></em> is present it @@ -5447,31 +5468,31 @@ template homedir (G) string <em class="parameter"><code>%U</code></em> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT user name.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>template homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/%D/%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555380"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555499"></a> template shell (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555381"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555500"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this - parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555419"></a> + parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555539"></a> time offset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555420"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555540"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555479"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555598"></a> time server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555480"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555599"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time server</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555529"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555648"></a> unix charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555530"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555650"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use. </p><p>This is also the charset Samba will use when specifying arguments @@ -5480,20 +5501,20 @@ unix charset (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">ASCII</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555595"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555714"></a> unix extensions (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555596"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555716"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc... These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of no current use to Windows clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix extensions</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555643"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555762"></a> unix password sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555644"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555763"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the program specified in the <em class="parameter"><code>passwd @@ -5502,10 +5523,10 @@ unix password sync (G) old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix password sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555704"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555823"></a> update encrypted (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555705"></a><a name="UPDATEENCRYPTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555824"></a><a name="UPDATEENCRYPTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext password over the @@ -5523,10 +5544,10 @@ update encrypted (G) passwords. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>update encrypted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555822"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555941"></a> use client driver (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555823"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555942"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients. It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required @@ -5551,10 +5572,10 @@ use client driver (S) on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server.</em></span></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use client driver</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555914"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556022"></a> use kerberos keytab (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555916"></a><a name="USEKERBEROSKEYTAB"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556023"></a><a name="USEKERBEROSKEYTAB"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Specifies whether Samba should attempt to maintain service principals in the systems keytab file for <code class="constant">host/FQDN</code> and <code class="constant">cifs/FQDN</code>. </p><p> @@ -5566,10 +5587,10 @@ default_keytab_name = FILE:/etc/krb5.keytab </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use kerberos keytab</code></em> = <code class="literal">False</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555983"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556091"></a> use mmap (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555984"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556092"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code> by @@ -5578,10 +5599,10 @@ use mmap (G) the tdb internal code. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use mmap</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556035"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556143"></a> username level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556036"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556144"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the @@ -5596,10 +5617,10 @@ username level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username level</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556117"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556224"></a> username map script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556118"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556226"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP">username map</a> parameter. This parameter specifies and external program or script that must accept a single command line option (the username transmitted in the authentication @@ -5610,10 +5631,10 @@ username map script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/mapusers.sh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556193"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556301"></a> username map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556194"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556302"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they @@ -5697,16 +5718,16 @@ username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # no username map</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556473"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556581"></a> <a name="USER"></a>user -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556474"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556505"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556582"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556613"></a> <a name="USERS"></a>users -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556506"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556537"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556614"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556644"></a> username (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556538"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556645"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right).</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case @@ -5744,28 +5765,28 @@ username (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556707"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556814"></a> usershare allow guests (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556708"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556816"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed to be accessed by non-authenticated users or not. It is the equivalent of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting <em class="parameter"><code>guest ok = yes</code></em> in a share definition. Due to the security sensitive nature of this the default is set to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare allow guests</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556760"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556867"></a> usershare max shares (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556761"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556868"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares that are allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the usershare directory. If set to zero (the default) user defined shares are ignored. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare max shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556805"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556913"></a> usershare owner only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556806"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556914"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by a user defined shares must be owned by the user creating the user defined share or not. If set to True (the default) then smbd checks that the directory path being shared is owned by @@ -5775,10 +5796,10 @@ usershare owner only (G) regardless of who owns it. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare owner only</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556855"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556962"></a> usershare path (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556856"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556964"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files. This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for other, and be writable only by the group owner. In addition the @@ -5799,10 +5820,10 @@ usershare path (G) In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create user defined shares. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare path</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556926"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557033"></a> usershare prefix allow list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556927"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557034"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. If the pathname exported doesn't start with one of the strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed. This allows the Samba @@ -5817,10 +5838,10 @@ usershare prefix allow list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix allow list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home /data /space</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556998"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557106"></a> usershare prefix deny list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556999"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557107"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. If the pathname exported starts with one of the strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed. Any pathname not @@ -5836,10 +5857,10 @@ usershare prefix deny list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix deny list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc /dev /private</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557073"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557181"></a> usershare template share (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557074"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557182"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters such as path, guest ok etc. This parameter allows usershares to "cloned" from an existing share. If "usershare template share" is set to the name of an existing share, then all usershares @@ -5854,10 +5875,10 @@ usershare template share (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare template share</code></em> = <code class="literal">template_share</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557146"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557253"></a> use sendfile (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557147"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557254"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> system call is supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's @@ -5866,10 +5887,10 @@ use sendfile (S) Windows 9x (using sendfile from Linux will cause these clients to fail). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use sendfile</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557203"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557311"></a> use spnego (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557204"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This variable controls controls whether samba will try +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557312"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. </p><p> @@ -5877,10 +5898,10 @@ use spnego (G) implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557252"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557360"></a> utmp directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557254"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557361"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal"> --with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that @@ -5892,10 +5913,10 @@ utmp directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/utmp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557330"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557438"></a> utmp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557332"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557439"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal">--with-utmp</code>. If set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records @@ -5907,10 +5928,10 @@ utmp (G) to find this number. This may impede performance on large installations. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557393"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557501"></a> valid users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557394"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557502"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the <em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> parameter. @@ -5926,10 +5947,10 @@ valid users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>valid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">greg, @pcusers</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557484"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557592"></a> -valid (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557486"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557593"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible. </p><p> @@ -5938,10 +5959,10 @@ valid users (S) Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>-valid</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557534"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557641"></a> veto files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557535"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557642"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards. @@ -5972,10 +5993,10 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">No files or directories are vetoed.</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557652"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557760"></a> veto oplock files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557654"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557761"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only valid when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that @@ -5996,31 +6017,31 @@ veto oplock files = /.*SEM/ </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto oplock files</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # No files are vetoed for oplock grants</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557746"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557853"></a> <a name="VFSOBJECT"></a>vfs object -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557747"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557778"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557854"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557885"></a> vfs objects (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557779"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557886"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal">extd_audit recycle</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557838"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557945"></a> volume (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557839"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557946"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>volume</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # the name of the share</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557881"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557989"></a> wide links (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557882"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557990"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only @@ -6028,10 +6049,10 @@ wide links (S) effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wide links</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557933"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558041"></a> winbind cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557934"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558042"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again.</p><p> @@ -6039,10 +6060,10 @@ winbind cache time (G) evaluated in real time unless the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDOFFLINELOGON">winbind offline logon</a> option has been enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">300</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558005"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558112"></a> winbind enum groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558006"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558113"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the <code class="literal">setgrent()</code>, <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> and <code class="literal">endgrent()</code> group of system calls. If @@ -6050,10 +6071,10 @@ winbind enum groups (G) <code class="constant">no</code>, calls to the <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> system call will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558095"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558203"></a> winbind enum users (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558096"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558204"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the <code class="literal">setpwent()</code>, <code class="literal">getpwent()</code> and <code class="literal">endpwent()</code> group of system calls. If @@ -6065,10 +6086,10 @@ winbind enum users (G) full user list when searching for matching usernames. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum users</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558189"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558296"></a> winbind expand groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558190"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558298"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd will traverse when flattening nested group memberships of Windows domain groups. This is different from the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS">winbind nested groups</a> option @@ -6080,10 +6101,10 @@ winbind expand groups (G) must perform the group unrolling and will be unable to answer incoming NSS or authentication requests during this time.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind expand groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558257"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558365"></a> winbind nested groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558258"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558366"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested groups. Nested groups are also called local groups or aliases. They work like their counterparts in Windows: Nested groups are defined locally on any machine (they are shared @@ -6091,25 +6112,33 @@ winbind nested groups (G) global groups from any trusted SAM. To be able to use nested groups, you need to run nss_winbind.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nested groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558307"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558415"></a> winbind normalize names (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558308"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace - whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character. - For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be - replaced with the string "space_kadet". - Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty with usernames - contains whitespace due to the default field separator in the shell. - Do not enable this option if the underscore character is used in - account names within your domain - </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558416"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace + whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character. + For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be + replaced with the string "space_kadet". + Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty with usernames + contains whitespace due to the default field separator in the shell. + If your domain possesses names containing the underscore character, + this option may cause problems unless the name aliasing feature + is supported by your nss_info plugin. + </p><p>This feature also enables the name aliasing API which can + be used to make domain user and group names to a non-qlaified + version. Please refer to the manpage for the configured + idmap and nss_info plugin for the specifics on how to configure + name aliasing for a specific configuration. Name aliasing takes + precendence (and is mutually exclusive) over the whitespace + replacement mechanism discussed previsouly. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558373"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558502"></a> winbind nss info (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558374"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558503"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name Service Information to construct a user's home directory and login shell. Currently the following settings are available: @@ -6131,10 +6160,10 @@ winbind nss info (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nss info</code></em> = <code class="literal">template sfu</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558493"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558622"></a> winbind offline logon (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558494"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558623"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should allow to login with the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module using Cached Credentials. If enabled, winbindd will store user credentials from successful logins encrypted in a local cache. @@ -6142,29 +6171,37 @@ winbind offline logon (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind offline logon</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558562"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558691"></a> + +winbind reconnect delay (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558692"></a><a name="WINBINDRECONNECTDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of + seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will wait between + attempts to contact a Domain controller for a domain that is + determined to be down or not contactable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind reconnect delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558744"></a> winbind refresh tickets (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558563"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558745"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets retrieved using the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558628"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558811"></a> winbind rpc only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558630"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558812"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Setting this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> forces winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind rpc only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558677"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558860"></a> winbind separator (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558678"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558861"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN </code></em>\<em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em>. This parameter is only applicable when using the <code class="filename">pam_winbind.so</code> @@ -6175,10 +6212,10 @@ winbind separator (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind separator</code></em> = <code class="literal">+</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558764"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558947"></a> winbind trusted domains only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558765"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558948"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed via NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid's for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain. @@ -6186,14 +6223,13 @@ winbind trusted domains only (G) the account user1 in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid for him or her. </p><p> This parameter is now deprecated in favor of the newer idmap_nss backend. - Refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> smb.conf option and - the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information. + Refer to the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind trusted domains only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558844"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559014"></a> winbind use default domain (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558845"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559015"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own @@ -6203,10 +6239,10 @@ winbind use default domain (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind use default domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558916"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559087"></a> wins hook (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558917"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559088"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as @@ -6227,17 +6263,17 @@ wins hook (G) addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is empty then the name should be deleted.</p></li></ul></div><p>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program <code class="literal">nsupdate</code> is provided in the examples - directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559022"></a> + directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559193"></a> wins proxy (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559024"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559194"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> for some older clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559077"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559248"></a> wins server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559078"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559249"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) of the WINS server that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> should register with. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</p><p>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network.</p><p>If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can @@ -6256,19 +6292,19 @@ wins server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559188"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559358"></a> wins support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559189"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559359"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should not set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to be your WINS server. Note that you should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> on more than one machine in your network.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559257"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559428"></a> workgroup (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559258"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559429"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = domain</a> @@ -6276,16 +6312,16 @@ workgroup (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>workgroup</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYGROUP</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559329"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559500"></a> <a name="WRITABLE"></a>writable -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559330"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559360"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559501"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559531"></a> writeable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559362"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a>.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559399"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559532"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a>.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559570"></a> write cache size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559400"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559571"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> do this for non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request @@ -6303,10 +6339,10 @@ write cache size (S) </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">262144 # for a 256k cache size per file</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559483"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559658"></a> write list (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559484"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559659"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a> option is set to. The list can @@ -6321,17 +6357,17 @@ write list (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write list</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, root, @staff</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559576"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559752"></a> write raw (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559577"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559753"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559620"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559795"></a> wtmp directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559621"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559796"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal"> --with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact @@ -6343,7 +6379,7 @@ wtmp directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wtmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/log/wtmp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559703"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p> +</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559879"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p> Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility. </p><p> @@ -6356,8 +6392,8 @@ wtmp directory (G) for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559753"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559764"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> - <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559844"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559929"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559940"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> + <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2560019"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. </p><p> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html index 0648f42d94..6c3d2d286d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html @@ -10,13 +10,19 @@ The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Run interactively. Individual commands of the form destination message-type parameters can be entered on STDIN. An empty command line or a "q" will quit the - program.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">destination</span></dt><dd><p>One of <em class="parameter"><code>nmbd</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>smbd</code></em> or a process ID.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>smbd</code></em> destination causes the - message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>nmbd</code></em> destination causes the + program.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">destination</span></dt><dd><p>One of <em class="parameter"><code>nmbd</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>smbd</code></em> or a process ID.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>all</code></em> destination causes the + message to "broadcast" to all running daemons including nmbd and + winbind. This is a change for Samba 3.3, prior to this the + paramter smbd used to do this.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>smbd</code></em> destination causes the + message to be sent to the smbd daemon specified in the + <code class="filename">smbd.pid</code> file.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>nmbd</code></em> destination causes the message to be sent to the nmbd daemon specified in the - <code class="filename">nmbd.pid</code> file.</p><p>If a single process ID is given, the message is sent + <code class="filename">nmbd.pid</code> file.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>winbindd</code></em> destination causes the + message to be sent to the winbind daemon specified in the + <code class="filename">winbindd.pid</code> file.</p><p>If a single process ID is given, the message is sent to only that process.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">message-type</span></dt><dd><p>Type of message to send. See the section <code class="constant">MESSAGE-TYPES</code> for details. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">parameters</span></dt><dd><p>any parameters required for the message-type</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482572"></a><h2>MESSAGE-TYPES</h2><p>Available message types are:</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">close-share</span></dt><dd><p>Order smbd to close the client + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">parameters</span></dt><dd><p>any parameters required for the message-type</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482607"></a><h2>MESSAGE-TYPES</h2><p>Available message types are:</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">close-share</span></dt><dd><p>Order smbd to close the client connections to the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the share name for which client connections will be closed, or the @@ -59,8 +65,8 @@ compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Run interactiv to update their local version of the driver. Can only be sent to smbd.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">reload-config</span></dt><dd><p>Force daemon to reload smb.conf configuration file. Can be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>, <code class="constant">nmbd</code>, or <code class="constant">winbindd</code>. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478445"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478456"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478481"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478480"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478491"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478516"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..51e517740f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb_traffic_analyzer</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer — log Samba VFS read and write operations through a socket + to a helper application</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2518313"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the + <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> VFS module logs + client write and read operations on a Samba server and sends this data + over a socket to a helper program, which feeds a SQL database. More + information on the helper programs can be obtained from the + homepage of the project at: + http://holger123.wordpress.com/smb-traffic-analyzer/ + </p><p><code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> currently is aware + of the following VFS operations:</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>write</td></tr><tr><td>pwrite</td></tr><tr><td>read</td></tr><tr><td>pread</td></tr></table><p><code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> sends the following data + in a fixed format seperated by a comma through either an internet or a + unix domain socket:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + BYTES|USER|DOMAIN|READ/WRITE|SHARE|FILENAME|TIMESTAMP + </pre><p>Description of the records: + + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">BYTES</code> - the length in bytes of the VFS operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">USER</code> - the user who initiated the operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">DOMAIN</code> - the domain of the user</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">READ/WRITE</code> - either "W" for a write operation or "R" for read</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">SHARE</code> - the name of the share on which the VFS operation occured</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">FILENAME</code> - the name of the file that was used by the VFS operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">TIMESTAMP</code> - a timestamp, formatted as "yyyy-mm-dd hh-mm-ss.ms" indicating when the VFS operation occured</p></li></ul></div><p> + + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482489"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">smb_traffic_analyzer:mode = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>If STRING matches to "unix_domain_socket", the module will + use a unix domain socket located at /var/tmp/stadsocket, if + STRING contains an different string or is not defined, the module will + use an internet domain socket for data transfer.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">smb_traffic_analyzer:host = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>The module will send the data to the system named with + the hostname STRING.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">smb_traffic_analyzer:port = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>The module will send the data using the TCP port given + in STRING + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482546"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The module running on share "example_share", using a unix domain socket</p><pre class="programlisting"> + <em class="parameter"><code>[example_share]</code></em> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH">path = /data/example</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER:MODE">smb_traffic_analyzer:mode = unix_domain_socket</a> + </pre><p>The module running on share "example_share", using an internet domain socket, + connecting to host "examplehost" on port 3491.</p><pre class="programlisting"> + <em class="parameter"><code>[example_share]</code></em> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH">path = /data/example</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER:HOST">smb_traffic_analyzer:host = examplehost</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER:PORT">smb_traffic_analyzer:port = 3490</a> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478300"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478310"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed + by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar + to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original version of the VFS module and the + helper tools were created by Holger Hetterich.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html index 87d67bb47d..b04ecab0a7 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html @@ -127,9 +127,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. where the user and group mappings are stored by winbindd. If this store is deleted or corrupted, there is no way for winbindd to determine which user and group ids correspond to Windows NT user - and group rids. </p><p>See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> or the old <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a> parameters in - <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> for options for sharing this - database, such as via LDAP.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478675"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p>Configuration of the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> daemon + and group rids. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478640"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p>Configuration of the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> daemon is done through configuration parameters in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file. All parameters should be specified in the [global] section of smb.conf. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDSEPARATOR">winbind separator</a></p></li><li><p> @@ -146,7 +144,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. Setting this parameter forces winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers. - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525538"></a><h2>EXAMPLE SETUP</h2><p> + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525503"></a><h2>EXAMPLE SETUP</h2><p> To setup winbindd for user and group lookups plus authentication from a domain controller use something like the following setup. This was tested on an early Red Hat Linux box. @@ -197,7 +195,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ and that you can login to your unix box as a domain user, using the DOMAIN+user syntax for the username. You may wish to use the commands <code class="literal">getent passwd</code> and <code class="literal">getent group - </code> to confirm the correct operation of winbindd.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525746"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>The following notes are useful when configuring and + </code> to confirm the correct operation of winbindd.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525711"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>The following notes are useful when configuring and running <code class="literal">winbindd</code>: </p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> must be running on the local machine for <code class="literal">winbindd</code> to work. </p><p>PAM is really easy to misconfigure. Make sure you know what you are doing when modifying PAM configuration files. It is possible @@ -205,7 +203,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ then in general the user and groups ids allocated by winbindd will not be the same. The user and group ids will only be valid for the local machine, unless a shared <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a> is configured.</p><p>If the the Windows NT SID to UNIX user and group id mapping - file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525817"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>The following signals can be used to manipulate the + file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525783"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>The following signals can be used to manipulate the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> daemon. </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">SIGHUP</span></dt><dd><p>Reload the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file and apply any parameter changes to the running version of winbindd. This signal also clears any cached @@ -213,7 +211,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ by winbindd is also reloaded. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">SIGUSR2</span></dt><dd><p>The SIGUSR2 signal will cause <code class="literal"> winbindd</code> to write status information to the winbind log file.</p><p>Log files are stored in the filename specified by the - log file parameter.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525882"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf(5)</code></span></dt><dd><p>Name service switch configuration file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">/tmp/.winbindd/pipe</span></dt><dd><p>The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with + log file parameter.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525848"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf(5)</code></span></dt><dd><p>Name service switch configuration file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">/tmp/.winbindd/pipe</span></dt><dd><p>The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> program. For security reasons, the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the <code class="filename">/tmp/.winbindd</code> directory @@ -234,8 +232,8 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ compiled using the <em class="parameter"><code>--with-lockdir</code></em> option. This directory is by default <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/var/locks </code>. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">$LOCKDIR/winbindd_cache.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>Storage for cached user and group information. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526038"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526049"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><code class="filename">nsswitch.conf(5)</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="wbinfo.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">wbinfo</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="pam_winbind.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">pam_winbind</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526106"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526004"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526015"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><code class="filename">nsswitch.conf(5)</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="wbinfo.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">wbinfo</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="pam_winbind.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">pam_winbind</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526072"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p><code class="literal">wbinfo</code> and <code class="literal">winbindd</code> were |